Chrysler 2013 Town & Country Owner's manual

Chrysler 2013 Town & Country Owner's manual
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Town & Country
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and
equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment
that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them
on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision work- nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essen- tion.
tials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should Consult the following table for a description of the
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears stamped on
the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and
printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .17
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . .43
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SLIDING SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .73
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . .49
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .53
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .71
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .85
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES
(NO FACTORY INSTALLED REAR SEATS) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children In
Commercial Cargo Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .120
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACCESSORY
— ON/RUN
— START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
2
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
SENTRY KEY®
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds),
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
or unlocked.
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatsystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if an ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the
reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
problems and loss of security protection.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoAll of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
Replacement Keys
CAUTION! (Continued)
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer sysvehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it authorized dealer.
cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
Customer Key Programming
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light
will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
subject to the following conditions:
Rearming Of The System
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
General Information
• This device must accept any interference that may be The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
received, including interference that may cause unde- additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
sired operation.
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- To Arm The System
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
provides both audible and visible signals, for the first
further information).
three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, To Disarm The System
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, the following methods:
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
key is physically removed from the ignition.
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
vehicle:
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
information).
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
position.
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
further information).
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N(RKE) transmitter.
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
Tamper Alert
door the alarm will sound.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Override
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
the far left detent position).
doors or open any door.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
NOTE:
vehicle to activate the system.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on
the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position). to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
2
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transmitters, and those built with power options will be
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
Using The RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
Key Fob With Three-Button RKE Transmitter
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions that
allow the same basic operation as the three-button, but
may also be used to operate the power liftgate (optional),
power sliding doors, Remote Start feature (optional). Some
features can be programmed to the customers preferences.
For example, flash headlights or sound horn on LOCK.
Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the
Illuminated Entry system.
Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter:
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performits previous setting.
ing the following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit1. Perform this operation while standing outside the ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
vehicle.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Security Alarm.
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate
button while still holding the LOCK button.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn With Remote Lock
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressare locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
proceed as follows:
removed.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
its previous setting.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
following steps:
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
vehicle.
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Using The Panic Alarm
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate.
If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second console.
time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
NOTE:
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
PANIC button a second time, you may have to move If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate
noises of the system.
does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is Alarm.
running.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door —
If Equipped
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Close
the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE
transmitter is pushed while the door is being power-closed,
the door will reverse to the full open position.
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on
the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock —
If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is If Equipped
armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitVehicle Security Alarm.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door —
the current setting, proceed as follows:
If Equipped
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
following steps:
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
vehicle.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
Programming Additional Transmitters
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressbattery.
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and NOTE:
the Key Fob removed.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
hand.
the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
Separating RKE Transmitter
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
NOTE:
• Hood closed
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
•
reduce this range.
•
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The engine can be started times (two 15 minutes cycles)
with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch
must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP button
twice (or the ignition switch must be cycled to the
ON/RUN position).
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Enter The Vehicle After Remote Start
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
cycle.
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. After the
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, press and
release the START/STOP button (or insert the Key Fob
will automatically lock the doors.
into the ignition switch and move it to the ON/RUN
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during position), otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of
Remote Start mode.
15- minute cycle.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). • For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NThen, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Key
release the START/STOP button. If the START/STOP butTo Run” will display in the EVIC until you insert and
ton is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition
turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to “Electronic
switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for further
information.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
the START/STOP button.
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Remote Start
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Active - Key To Run⬙ will display in the EVIC until you
insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Remote Start
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start Mode
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
occur:
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Fuel lamp turns on
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds
after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
• The hood is opened
When To Reset Remote Start
• Any engine warning lights come on
• The hazard switch is pressed
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start• The brake pedal is pressed
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
cycle
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by cycling
the START/STOP button to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs
on each door trim panel.
2
If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side
sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Sliding Door Lock
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit —
If Equipped
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not NOTE:
operate if there is any manual operation of the power • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
door locks (lock or unlock).
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderOn vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for an
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
extended period of time, the Passive Entry feature for
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
Entry feature.
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
features in accordance with local laws.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the • If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Liftgate
Transmitter In Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a (1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you the liftgate
present in the ignition.
handle. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is programmed
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you cycle the
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors liftgate handle. For further information, refer to “Elechave been closed the vehicle checks the inside and tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Undertransmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE standing Your Instrument Panel”. All doors will remain
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other locked when the liftgate release handle is pressed
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out- regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times Press”).
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver’s
door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent
windows from the driver’s seat.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Vent Window Switch Open/Close
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
You can control either the front or rear windows using for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power acces- Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
sory delay.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
depressing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Power Windows
Driver’s Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
2
Power Window Lockout Switch
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
1 - Window Open/Close
and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. 2 - Power Door Locks
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
The front window switches may be equipped with an AutoDown feature. Press the window switch past the detent, To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
release, and the window will go down automatically.
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to stop. NOTE:
The power window switches remain active for up to • If the window runs into any obstacle during auto10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting)
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
The front driver and front passenger switches may be
first detent and hold to close window manually.
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
If Equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single switch on the door handle
assembly.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following accessory delay.
steps after vehicle power is restored:
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has Wind Buffeting
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and
buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open, sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
stopping several inches above the window sill.
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol- NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
lowing guidelines:
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
• Always open the door smoothly.
fuel door.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening the door. This is very important when your vehicle Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
The power sliding door may be opened or
the downhill direction.
closed manually or by using the buttons on the
RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
power
sliding
door handle will also power open or close
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
the
power
sliding
door.
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
exterior handle.
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within
5 seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within 5 seconds a
second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console
for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once
will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed
while the door is under a power cycle, the door will
reverse direction.
Power Sliding Door Switch
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled and will go into manual
mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding • If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
master lock button, located in the overhead console,
is fully open and then press the switch again.
to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat
passengers.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatiNOTE:
cally stop, the power sliding door motor will make a
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
clicking sound until the door has no further movement.
power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the
This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the
or outside handle. If this condition occurs, no damage is
power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and
done to the power sliding door motor. The power sliding
vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be
door must be opened or closed manually.
pressed.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previous
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for procedure.
12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
entering or exiting the vehicle.
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
disabled by performing the following procedure:
overhead console.
1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the
2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five
OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be
times ending in the ON/RUN position (do not start
opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
the engine).
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ- activating the inside power sliding door handle.
ARD switch ON.
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Master Lock
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
1. Open the sliding side door.
NOTE:
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward • After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always
test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
desired position.
Door Lock.
• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
Child Protection Door Lock
• The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front
of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child
Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear
seats, press the “OFF” Master Lock Out Switch located
in the front overhead console, next to the driver.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the
1. Open the sliding side door.
b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Prochild lock lever position.
tection Door Lock.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within
five seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate
is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds, a second time, will close the liftgate.
2
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1 — Left Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate
3 — Right Sliding Door
4 — Master Lock
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash
and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
(0 km/h).
position.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −12°F (−24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
times indicating power operation is in progress.
liftgate buttons.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
that span the front, second, and third row seating for
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
• Knee bolster for front passenger seat occupant
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may infant and child restraint systems. For more information
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
energy during an impact event
CHildren (LATCH).
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and third row
center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
which lock the seat belt webbing into position by
extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting
the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or
secure a large item in a seat
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
buckled up in a rear seat.
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment
can cause severe injury or death to infants in that
position.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
shoulder belts properly.
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
their arm.
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Lap/Shoulder Belts
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen belts.
far away from home or on your own street.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the belt to go around your lap.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Pulling Out Belt And Latch Plate
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit , insert the large latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
withdraw any slack in the belt.
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
headliner.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck. The
upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing
anywhere on the anchorage. To move the anchorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously
pushing down on the anchorage assembly.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
restraint system. For additional information refer to activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
under the “Child Restraint” section. The chart below to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
Driver
Center
Passenger
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
Second Row
ALR
N/A
ALR
Third Row
ALR
Cinch
ALR
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on locking mode.
all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime
WARNING!
a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
procedures in the Service Manual.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenThis safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
the occupant’s chest.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoSeat Belt Pretensioners
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
The seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
These devices may improve the performance of the seat trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
AHR In Reset Position
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
NOTE:
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuchecked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
notification.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the best way to keep the baby safe.
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
deactivating BeltAlert®.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with long enough. When it is not required, remove the exBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
tender and store it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
2
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag
2 — Knee Bolster
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
air bags are located above the side windows and their
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatThis vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/or front NOTE:
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
Advanced Front Air Bags.
authorized dealer immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Air Bag System Components
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
system components:
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Air Bag Warning Light
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats
“ONLY”.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the NOTE:
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
vehicle may deploy.
bag only.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
but they will open during air bag deployment.
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll- • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
killed.
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the The system includes side impact sensors that are calihead of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy down- require air bag occupant protection.
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
(Continued)
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up
against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children,
should not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows,
or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the child.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
required for this vehicle.
Knee Impact Bolster
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecoccupant protection.
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliare not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
or rollover collisions.
away from an inflating air bag.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
WARNING!
are possible, based on several factors, including the
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
air bag system immediately.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air Inflator Units
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering collision.
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units.
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes
in the side of the air bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
This especially applies to children.
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
(SABIC) Inflator Units
it is inflated.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes Front And Side Impact Sensors
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliin determining appropriate response to impact events.
seconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
Cut off fuel to the engine.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or or all of the following may occur:
until the ignition key is turned off.
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abraTurn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed. passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you
Unlock the doors automatically.
might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have denot permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if bags will not be in place to protect you.
you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This NOTE: For additional information, refer to
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. CanaChildren 12 years or younger should ride properly dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s webbuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Child Restraints
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
WARNING!
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
when installing an infant or child restraint.
allowed by the child seat.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
Older Children And Child Restraints
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Second Row Captains Chairs
Second Row Bench
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
N/A
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes; second row outboard positions only,
third row all positions.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual
for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchors lo- anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
cated behind each rear seatback, near to the floor. anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH – Commercial Cargo Vehicles
(No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuLATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. restraint systems will be installed as described here.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Center Seat LATCH
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autothe seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position.
position has.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manurestraint to get a better fit.
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
tions to attach a tether anchor.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
turer’s instructions.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) them.
in any direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
Improper installation of a child restraint to the be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
Seat Belt
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking the following sections for more information about both
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts.
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
WARNING!
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
Second Row Bench
Second Row Captains Chair
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes; second row outboard positions only,
third row all positions.
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt path
of the child restraint?
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed,
if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be
twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist
the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
2
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Second Row Captains Chairs
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
(Second Row Anchorage Shown)
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES (NO FACTORY
INSTALLED REAR SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
2
WARNING!
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in
a vehicle without rear seats. In a collision, serious
injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger Air Bag.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forwardfacing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger Air Bag. In a collision, a passenger Air Bag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Restraining Infants And Small Children In
Commercial Cargo Vehicles
• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearwardfacing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is
properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat
should be adjusted to the rear most position.
• Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured
in the passenger seat in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
rear most position. Older children who do not use
children from newborn size to the child almost large
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the
correct for your child:
seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never allow
• The forward-facing child seat is for children from about
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or
20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year old.
under their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower
condition that might affect the performance of the
rear of the front passenger seat.
strap is observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your autho2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
rized dealership for a replacement part.
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
WARNING!
extended tether strap.
Tether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result. Contact your authorized dealer for a replacement part.
2
120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions AREA.
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
2
122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Seat Belts
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
system.
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside
the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123
Air Bag Warning Light
Floor Mat Safety Information
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the
light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on
while driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
2
124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into
the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 125
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . .139
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .134
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .139
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .135 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . . .140
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .138
䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .167
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .180
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . .200
▫ Quad Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .210
▫ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped. . . . .211
▫ Third Row Power Folding Seat —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks. . . . . . . . .217
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .190 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .217
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
RKE Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . .193
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .194
Memory Seat ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .224
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .224 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . .231
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .225
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .233
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .235
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .238
▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .250
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off —
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . .
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off —
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Front Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
. . .252
. . .254
. . .254
. . .255
. . .255
. . .256
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
▫ Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) . . . . . . .256 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .269
▫ Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . .259
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .260
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .261
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .265
▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .277
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Storage Bin Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Center And Rear Overhead Console
Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped. . .280
▫ Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . .281
▫ Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Super Console — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . . .283
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .298
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .298 䡵 SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .305
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
3
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) If Equipped
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and
will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the
WARNING!
inside mirror adjusts.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging three detent positions:
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
• full forward
mirror.
• full rearward and
• normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
door trim panel.
mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected positions can
be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver’s
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles
may not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this
case the heated mirrors will still function as intended.
Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors
in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
Seat Only) — If Equipped
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerTilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrupositioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground ment Panel” for further information.
rearward of the front doors. The driver’s outside mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Illuminated Mirror
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
Sensor Locations
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underdriver is alerted using both the visual and audible standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Blind Spot Alert
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury
or death.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the Blind Spot Alert Off
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
muted.
used
NOTE:
Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailableAstronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al- your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute different electronic devices to connect to each other without
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to
supported phones.
be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Cana- available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
dian Residents - visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another Voice Command Tree
prompt.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Help Command
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for directions. pairing instructions:
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button to begin.
• Press the
button on the radio control head.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Cancel Command
“Device Pairing”.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
after the initial pairing process.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webgive the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
“Dial”.
• Press the
button to begin.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
Uconnect® Phonebook”.
start the vehicle.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
appear in the display of certain radios.
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
able for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect® • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
website for supported phones.
phone is accessible.
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or • Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
by Saying a Name” section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phoneedited on the mobile phone. The changes are transbook entry, if desired.
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
button to begin.
• Press the
main menu.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
“Phonebook New Entry”.
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatiinstead of “Bob”.
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the to the main menu.
vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number to a name entry that already exists in the phonedeleted or edited.
book. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile
and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work
button to begin.
• Press the
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
“Phonebook Edit”.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
entry that you wish to edit.
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
button to begin.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, • Press the
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to
delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry
that you wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to
hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which
you choose. To select one of the entries from the list,
button while the Uconnect® Phone is
press the
playing the desired entry and say “Delete”.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
deleted.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
wish to delete.
is deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
language is deleted.
deleted or edited.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
• Press the
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
“Phonebook List Names”.
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- mobile service provider for the features that you have.
book entries, if available.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
button to begin.
but- Currently In Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
“Call”.
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysNOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
operations at this point.
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
to “Conference Call” in this section.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butNOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call ton until you hear a single beep.
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Toggling Between Calls
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
Progress
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
To make a second call while you are currently on a call, switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
Call Termination
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
Three-Way Calling
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while and hold the
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
Redial
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
button to begin.
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established, • Press the
button until you hear a double • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
“Redial”.
one conference call.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Call Continuation
Uconnect® Phone Features
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail• Press the
button to begin.
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep,
say the name of the language you wish to switch to
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
English, Espanol, or Francais.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
language selection.
• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
voice commands will be in that language.
which the call is automatically transferred from the
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone• An active call is automatically transferred to the mo- book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagebile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
specific and is usable across all languages.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
NOTE:
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
number for your area.
area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
follows:
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
button to begin.
• Press the
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
for the mobile phone directly.
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
WARNING!
To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emergency,
your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Roadside Assistance”.
NOTE:
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069
for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance”
coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
can press the
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
to leave a number on a pager.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
navigating through an automated telephone system.
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system or an automated service, such as a paging service system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
tones over the phone.
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
NOTE:
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Press the
button to begin.
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
one of the following:
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Phone And Network Status Indicators
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you notification to inform you of your phone and network
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to status when you are attempting to make a phone call
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
the voice prompt.
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you.
In order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
button.
• Press the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- • Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect®
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Phone System, follow the instructions described in your
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- mobile phone User’s Manual.
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • Press the
button to begin.
button • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
button and say “Sewith one electronic device at a time.
being announced, press the
lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Select Another Mobile Phone
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another • Press the
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the prompts.
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
button at any time while the
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
wish to delete.
you wish to select.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. Phone
If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect®
Phone will return to using the highest priority phone Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft. (9 m)) the To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from radio Reset
mode):
• Press the
button.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
the session begins, or,
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
button and say the “Voice Training”,
• Press the
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” command. This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to restore prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
not the Uconnect® Phone.
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Text Reply
Send Messages:
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
your phone.
a new message:
Read Messages:
• Press the
button.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
button.
• Press the
button while the
To send a message, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
List of Preset Messages:
10. Thanks
1. Yes
11. See You in 15 minutes
2. No
12. I am on my way
3. Where are you?
13. I’ll be late
4. I need more direction.
14. Are you there yet?
5. L O L
15. Where are we meeting?
6. Why
16. Can this wait?
7. I love you
17. Bye for now
8. Call me
18. When can we meet?
9. Call me later
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
the system from announcing the new incoming messages. Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
• Press the
button.
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Bluetooth® ON mode.
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you Power-Up
will then be given a choice to change it.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or
phone set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
following conditions:
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,
the party responsible for compliance could void the
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
• This device must accept any interference received,
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
including interference that may cause undesired opmay be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
eration.
voice level.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Main Menu
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
main menu.
Commands
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
The Voice Command system understands two types of • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
Changing the Volume
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
button.
Streaming mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disc Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”.
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you In this mode, you may say the following commands:
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
but• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
ton to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
following commands:
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Switch to setup”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep
Command
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
following:
Setup
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
3
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On some models, the front and rear seats may be On models that are equipped with remote start, the
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions.
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting SysWARNING!
tem — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Your Vehicle” for further information.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located on the switch bank
below the climate controls.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the second row seats are equipped with
heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the
second row passengers to operate the seats indepenNOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt dently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding
side door handle trim panels.
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the
have reached the desired position. Then, using body recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly
adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo- restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec- downward on the head restraint.
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the
gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the
AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce
the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger
in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information
Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
3
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or
loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of
the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is
secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active
Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal injury if
the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Push Button
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
“LOCK” position and then pull up on the storage bin
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seating, the
latch to open the cover.
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for
convenient storage.
Stow ’n Go® Seating — If Equipped
Second Row Stow ’n Go®
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go® seats, the seats
will fold and tumble in one motion.
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.
NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the
armrests are raised.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold
the outboard side of the seat.
automatically during the seat tumble. No additional
actuation is necessary.
3
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Folding Seatback
Tumbled Second Row Seat
The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy 6. Push the seat into the storage bin.
storage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
3
WARNING!
Seat In Storage Bin
7. Close the storage bin cover.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Unstow Second Row Seats
1. Return the seatback to the upright position.
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat
anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the “Unlocked” position.
Stow ’n Go® Seat — Folded And Latched Position
To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched
position: return the seatback and head restraint to the
upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner
lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest
and seatback and tumble seat forward.
Raising The Seatback
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
2. Return the head restraint to the upright position.
Easy Entry Second Row
The second row Stow ’n Go® seats allow easy entry to the
third row seat or rear cargo area.
Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
Raising The Head Restraint
3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard
side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and
tumble seat forward.
Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head
Restraint Fold Lever
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will automatically fold into position for easy
entry into the third row.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Quad Seats — If Equipped
Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
3
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat
Easy Entry
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position,
the seat cushion.
lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of
the seat and lift the seat forward.
Fold-Flat Quad Seat
Easy Entry Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull
strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the
bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on
the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the
seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.
Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers
Removal
The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is
needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the
cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor
latches.
Cross Beam For Seat Removal
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle
and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock
removable for added cargo space.
indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and
moved on its Easy Out® Rollers.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
Second Row Bench Seat
Release Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
WARNING!
3
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the and the vehicle is in PARK.
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side of
the head restraint.
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually NOTE:
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small
the following positions using the switch bank located on
buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting
the left rear trim panel:
to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a
different seat position selector switch to stop the seat.
Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position
can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle
detection for safe operation. When the system detects
an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from
the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle
and press the button again, for the desired position.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat
2 — Stow
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” located on the rear of the
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
seat to lower the seatback.
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback
by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the
head restraint down.
2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the
release strap marked “1” located on the outboard side
of the head restraint.
Release Strap “2”
Head Restraint Release Strap “1”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.
5. Pull release strap marked “4” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
3
Release Strap “3”
Release Strap “4”
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull release strap marked “2” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched.
Stowed Third Row Seat
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull release strap “4” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the 2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
anchors latch.
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Driver Memory Switch
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, outside transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
mirrors, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and each of the memory positions.
radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered 5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings
(up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
for that button and store a new one.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
remove the key.
the ON position.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
driver’s door.
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2.
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must
The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the
be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use
system to complete the memory recall before continua RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
ing to Step 3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview mirror to the desired positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
9. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
10. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
transmitters.
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
11. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
the ON position.
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2.
position using the other numbered Memory button A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY
or to link another RKE transmitter to memory.
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, outside mirrors, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second
will occur before another recall can be selected.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
transmitter.
remove the key.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
for the system to complete the memory recall before
Customer-Programmable Features⬙ in “Understanding
continuing to Step 3.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
on the driver’s door.
ONLY)
Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
button 1 on the driver’s door.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK vehicle.
button on the RKE transmitter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
key from the ignition switch.
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
or Easy Entry.
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat Entry and Easy Exit Position.
will return to its previously set position when you
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of or disabled through the programmable features in the
the LOCK position.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
safety catch lever downward while raising the hood
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
at the same time.
panel, below the steering column.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Safety Lever Location
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights and the fog lights.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Headlight Delay — If Equipped
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF)
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
position.
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interNOTE: The engine must be running before the head- val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your authorized dealer.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec- Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
Lights-On Reminder
headlight
switch control knob. Pressing the headlight
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
switch
control
knob in a second time will turn the front
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
fog
lights
off.
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lighting On
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight switch. Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
dimmer control is in this position.
Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate
is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
one of the following occur:
Dimmer Control
• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of • Any overhead reading light is left on
the instrument panel lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the The Halo control switch is located to the right of the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this dimmer switch.
feature to operate.
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme
bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the
doors or liftgate are open.
3
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This
feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead
displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Halo Lights — If Equipped
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
Halo Control
To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo
switch control upward or downward to increase
or decrease the lighting.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the:
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the • Turn Signals
steering column.
• Headlight Beams Low/High
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
• Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever
is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Turn Signal Warning
Flash-To-Pass
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to
alert the driver.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Lane Change Assist
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
three times then automatically turn off.
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle speHigh/Low Beam Switch
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi- low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and tailfrom low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film
operation.
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
To Deactivate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center SmartBeam™ system.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informaEVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
tion.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
tion.
AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
position.
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information.
3. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the on position.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Battery Protection
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifuncfront fog lights are left on for extended periods of time tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
Washer And Wiper Controls
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever
to select the desired delay interval. There are five delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Windshield Washers
Rear Wiper And Washer
To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the
second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermittent interval.
Mist Feature
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
the steering column) to the first detent and release for a
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
single wiping cycle.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to feature.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or the
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield.
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or
the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move
the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls. There are also soft-keys
in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering
wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
To Resume Speed
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
To Vary The Speed Setting
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moder- PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
ate hills is normal.
IF EQUIPPED
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed and audible indications of the distance between the
Control.
rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Sensors
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
changed to the ON/RUN position.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or direction, depending on the location, type and orientaabove. A display warning will appear in the EVIC indi- tion of the obstacle.
cating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed
is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed
if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer(9 km/h).
Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense® Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
3
ParkSense® Warning Display
Park Assist System ON
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist System OFF
Slow Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Mute
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will MUTE the radio, if on, when the The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
system is sounding an audio tone.
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaEnabling/Disabling ParkSense®
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the further information.
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift
lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the
EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
System
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
When the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System is malsnow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
chime, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILauthorized dealer.
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Re- If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
fer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further- • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
more, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC .
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift
lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a distances for each zone:
hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — Without
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance Navigation/Multimedia Radio
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. 1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available.
The base front overhead console model featured fixed
incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium
front overhead console model features a LED focused
light that illuminates the instrument panel cupholders,
two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage,
conversation mirror, optional power sliding door
switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
3
Overhead Console
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only)
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door latch to open the
compartment.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
Over Door Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
3
Conversation Mirror Position
NOTE: From the “conversation mirror” position, the
From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by door can only be closed.
rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, To return to the full open position, the door must first be
positioned for conversation mirror use.
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to
Full Open Position
release.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights.
The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
3
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — DVD*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD*
Interior Lights
Halo Lighting
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differThe rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
located above the center button.
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/
Halo Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding the
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Console Halo Lighting
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
Training The Garage Door Opener
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held trans6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
mitter button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the inditwo seconds each time). If the garage door opener/
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
device activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actiRelease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
not release the button.
Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrom slow to rapid.
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
steps.
and observe the indicator light.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programFor programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
before 1995.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
erase the channels.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
follow these steps:
the same manner.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do door or gate motor.
not release the button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
steps.
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
several seconds of transmission.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indiCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
fully trained.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage follow these steps:
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programnot release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
3.
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink®
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
programming, plug it back in at this time.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The Troubleshooting Tips
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
any time.
here are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all • Did you unplug the device for programming and
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
remember to plug it back in?
erased.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key in the ignition switch (or leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening
held rearward again.
of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
Closing Sunroof — Express
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind Buffeting
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
Sunshade Operation
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenance
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.
open.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
Sunroof Fully Closed
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
Information Center (EVIC)
sunroof is fully closed.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
will cancel this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
CAUTION!
Instrument Panel Outlets
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped)
shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument
panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed
a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared
between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor
console outlet.
On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power
outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access
the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it
toward the instrument panel.
Super Console Outlets
Removable Console Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
3
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with
Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with
Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
The power inverter switch is located on the instrument
A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts panel below the climate controls.
DC current to AC current, and is located on the left To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
passenger seat.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and
XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Power Inverter Outlet
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All
liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner
from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge
for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cupholders” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Front Cupholders
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the
On models equipped with the Super Console, there are pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console.
Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the
two cupholders located in the center of the console.
cupholders.
Super Console — If Equipped
3
Super Console Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped
Interior Bottle Holders
On models equipped with premium center consoles, there There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
are four cupholders located on the top of the console.
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Premium Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so
the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the
ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Interior Bottle Holder
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating. STORAGE
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes, Glove Compartments
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press in on the button, To open the lower compartment pull out on the release
located on the left side of the upper door. The door will handle.
automatically open.
Lower Compartment
Upper Compartment
To close the compartment door, push downward on the
door’s surface to latch the door closed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Door Trim Panel Storage
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Front Door Storage
The driver’s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
3
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The area below the floor covers, located in front of the
the left front door entry scuff molding.
second row seats, is available for storage.
Umbrella Holder
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
3
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the
storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
(Continued)
(Continued)
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an
Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mechanism.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
3
Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage —
If Equipped
The overhead storage system comes in several options.
Overhead Console Features
1 — DVD*
2 — Rear HVAC
3 — Courtesy Lights
4 — Storage
* If equipped, otherwise storage.
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage
DVD*
Courtesy Lights
Halo Lighting
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
CONSOLE FEATURES
Basic Console
There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and Basic Console features consist of the following:
Super.
• The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices should
be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while
driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
the console base.
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
3. Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly Premium Console — If Equipped
higher than the rear).
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/hook. sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole bin offers multiple configurations.
is centered on the winch hole.
• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for cleaning. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing downcups or mugs with handles.
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
• Top tray storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
or other items
and a convenient storage tray.
• Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
3
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Console Position 1
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins
storage area below.
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 2
Console Position 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost To Remove The Premium Floor Console
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
console.
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/centimeters.
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To Reinstall The Premium Floor Console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
Console Position 4
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Super Console — If Equipped
Front Lower Pass Through
The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing
lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front
and rear pull out drawer.
tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door
The super console contains a pass through storage area slides rearward.
accessible for both the driver and front passenger.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through
lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the
instrument panel, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Located in the back of the super console is a storage
drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.
Super Console
1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door
Rear Drawer Storage
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side
of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that
recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle
is either running or the key is in the accessory position.
Press And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, REAR WINDOW FEATURES
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes
of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
Three-Press Switch
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the
crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack
does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or
stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deploying the Crossbars
CAUTION!
To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep
hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down.
Loosening Crossbars
Stowed Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
Then, position the crossbars across the roof.
NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in
any two of the three deploy positions.
3
Deployed Position
Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Three
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the thumb
with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the screws completely.
crossbars into the deployed positions.
Tightening Crossbar
Crossbar To Side Rail Installation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
Stowing the Crossbars
Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars
are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once
the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws
completely.
3
NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with rail tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops.
Rail Tie Loops
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Check deployed crossbars frequently and retighten
thumb screws as necessary.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed.
• The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the load
and the roof surface.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
3
Sun Screen Retracted
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .314
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .315
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Trip A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Trip B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ To Reset A Trip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .343 䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .355
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD
And MP3 Audio Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .363
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. .
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for
HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . .
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) .
. . . . .364
. . . . .364
CD
. . . . .370
. . . . .373
. . . . .375
. . . . .375
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .376 䡵 UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) —
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Blu-ray Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .389
. . . . . .389
. . . . . .390
. . . . . .391
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1. . . . . .394
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .396
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Play A Blu-ray Disc Using The Blu-ray Player
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Listen To An Audio Source While A Video
Is Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ VES™ Remote Control – If Equipped . . . . . . .406
▫ Blu-ray Player Remote Control – If Equipped . . .409
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .412
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Blu-ray Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .416
▫ Shared Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Information Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Numeric Keypad Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Station List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . .422
▫ Disc Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Product Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .436
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped . .443
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Instrument Cluster
— Shift Lever
— Radio
5
6
7
8
— Analog Clock
— Upper Glove Compartment
— Lower Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
9 — DVD – If Equipped
10 — Storage Bin
11 — Cup Holders
12 — Switch Bank
13
14
15
16
—
—
—
—
Ignition Switch
Hood Release
Dimmer Switch
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to
1. Tachometer
alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
5. High Beam Indicator
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
This indicator shows that the high beam head2. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
lights are on.
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
6. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
This indicator will illuminate when the park Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
lights or headlights are turned on.
Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
when the turn signal lever is operated.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to
Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
wheel) to access or reset the display.
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area
located in the instrument cluster.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) noFUSE
Display — If Equipped” for further information.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer dis- damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and fuse
play will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
gASCAP
CHAngE OIL
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
not start the engine).
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
within 10 seconds.
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles.
In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
NOTE:
Indicates vehicle speed.
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
12. Speedometer
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
13. Fuel Door Reminder
16. Shift Lever Indicator
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
vehicle.
NOTE:
14. Fuel Gauge
You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
The highest available transmission gear is displayed in
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa15. Air Bag Warning Light
tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while 17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxidealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
further information.
until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight secBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
onds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt ReON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- minder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light 20. Temperature Gauge
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaThe light also will turn on when the parking brake is ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application. ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
22. Charging System Light
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
(Continued)
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
If the charging system light remains on, it means that the 24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
This light warns of an overheated engine condisystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authotion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
rized dealer.
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
23. Oil Pressure Warning Light
allowed to cool.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vevehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
chime will sound when this light turns on.
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Do In Emergencies” for further information.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
During sustained high speed driving or trailer
This light informs you of a problem with the
towing up long grades on hot days, the autoElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
matic transmission oil may become too hot.
light will come on when the ignition is first
When the transmission overheat warning light
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle performance
until the automatic transmission cools down. Once the
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the transmission has cooled down and the light turns off, you
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the may continue to drive normally. If the high speed is
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is maintained, the overheating will continue to occur.
If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
4
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a The system allows the driver to select information by
variety of useful information by pressing the switches pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the wheel:
following:
• Radio Information
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
• System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll The EVIC display consists of three sections:
downward through the main menus and
1. The top line where compass direction and outside
sub-menus.
temperature are displayed.
SELECT Button
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
The SELECT button allows access to informamessages are displayed.
tion in EVIC submenus, selects some feature
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odomsettings, and resets some EVIC features. The
eter line.
EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT
button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long
as the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As
long as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed
in the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of
this message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out⬙ and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in
Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the • Wrong Key
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
• Damaged Key
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Key not programmed
the following messages:
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in ignition
• Key Left Vehicle
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Key Not Detected
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Low Tire Pressure
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in “Starting And Operating”)
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Remote start active — Key to Run
• Turn Signal On
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• RKE Battery Low
• Service Keyless System
• LOW WASHER FLUID
• Oil Change Required
• Check Gascap
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ conditions. When this message is displayed both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present.
• Service Blind Spot System — This message is displayed
to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is
permanently unavailable. The driver will receive an
• Service Park Assist System
EVIC message and the BSM display warning in both
• Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If this message
is present see an authorized dealer.
• Park Assist Disabled
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Electronic Range Select (ERS) Status
The shift lever status “5,4,3,2,1” are displayed indicating
the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” indicate the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged
and the gear selected is displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Low Fuel Light
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
This light will turn on when the electronic
fuel
is
added.
speed control is ready. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Loose Gascap Indicator
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten the fuel • Oil Pressure Warning Light
filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
off the message. If the problem continues, the message
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light will turn on to indicate the wind- This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
shield washer fluid is low.
• Charging System Light
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
telltales include:
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
• Door Ajar
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
This light will turn on to indicate that one or electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle).
more doors may be ajar.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light warns of an overheated engine conElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
dition. As temperatures rise and the gauge aplight will come on when the ignition is first
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Oil Change Required
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
your personal driving style.
OFF/LOCK position.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
(Do not start the engine.)
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you fuel economy is reset, the display will read “zero” for
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not two seconds. Then, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
average reading before the reset.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions display in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the
prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the
Average Fuel Economy Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change between mph or km/h.
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC.
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Elapsed Time
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to
highlight one of the following functions if you want to
reset it:
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Trip A
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button
reset.
to clear the resettable function being displayed.
Trip B
Tire PSI
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Units
• Coolant Temp
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
• Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
status indicator.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle • Engine Hours
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Messages #
Compass / Temperature Display
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
the Main Menu.
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to Automatic Compass Calibration
change ignition switch position, current ignition status
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
will be displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
display to the right of the odometer value.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
ating” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
SELECT button.
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
the EVIC.
environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
Manual Compass Calibration
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
function normally.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Compass Variance Map
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙System
Setup⬙ is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then
press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup
sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper select a feature form the following choices:
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
Language
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
When in this display you may select one of six languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
DOWN button while in this display and scroll through
the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select
Customer-Programmable Features
English, Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian,
(System Setup)
German, Dutch. Then, as you continue, the information
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
will display in the selected language.
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE
NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select “System
Setup” from the main menu.
Compass Variance
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
When this feature is selected the navigation system
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
utilizes voice commands, guiding you through the drive
operating information.
route mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. To make your selection, press and release Auto Unlock Doors
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the feature showing the system has been activated, or the
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
deactivated.
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind feature showing the system has been activated, or the
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE check-mark is removed showing the system has been
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph deactivated.
Nav–Turn By Turn
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
RKE Linked To Memory
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
and radio settings will return to the memory set position showing the system has been deactivated.
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, Horn With Remote Lock
and radio settings can only return to the memory set When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
position using the door mounted switch. To make your occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection,
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
appears next to the feature showing the system has been system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the showing the system has been deactivated.
system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
Horn with Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Flash Lamps with Lock
Headlamp Off Delay
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
then press and release the SELECT button until a check- Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting When ON is selected, the system will automatically
has been selected.
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
Headlights Only)
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxideactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your Key-Off Power Delay
selection, press and release the SELECT button until a When this feature is selected, the power window
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD
setting has been selected.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button Flashers with Sliding Door
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
that the setting has been selected.
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
Illuminated Approach
entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selecor the check-mark is removed showing the system has
tion, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
been deactivated.
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
that the setting has been selected.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the Blind Spot Alert
feature showing the system has been activated or the
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
Alert (“Blind Spot Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert
deactivated.
Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert Off”). The Blind Spot
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights”
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature
can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM”
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Blind
a reverse gear, the driver’s side mirror will tilt downward Spot Alert Off” is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and system is deactivated.
avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
Easy Exit Seat
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Turn Menu Off
Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off.
Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect® user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
Uconnect® 130
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
will begin to blink.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conanother selection. Holding either button will bypass
trol knob to save time change.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
and radio frequency.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Clock Setting Procedure
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. AM or FM frequencies.
SEEK Buttons
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SCROLL control knob.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
treble tones.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ this station and press and release that button. If a button
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
• Maximum number of files: 255
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
Supported Media (Disc Types)
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
display.)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3 File Formats
Layer 3
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
not play the file.
supported by the radios.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit supported.
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Playback of MP3 Files
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected vehicle speakers.
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option OFF).
before writing to the disc.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
Uconnect® 130
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further
stations without stopping, until you release it.
details.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone —
SEEK Buttons
If Equipped
TIME Button
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further and radio frequency.
details.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the five seconds will allow the program format type to be
selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is AM/FM Button
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Memory
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con- the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
save time change.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. MP3 Audio Play
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
NOTE:
pressing the pushbutton twice.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
position to operate the radio.
button number will display.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
Buttons 1 - 6
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
DISC/AUX Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
• Maximum number of files: 255
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
Supported Media (Disc Types)
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
display.)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3 File Formats
Layer 3
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
not play the file.
supported by the radios.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit supported.
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- limited coverage in Alaska.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
System Activation
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is
begin listening immediately to the one year of
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio service that is included with the factory-installed
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply
a welcome kit that contains general information, including
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
is OFF).
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
Please have the following information available when A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling:
mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
Number (ESN/SID).
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
ESN/SID Access
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi- the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll on or above the antenna.
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
cause signal blockage.
button a second time.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite)
Mode
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availACC position to operate the radio.
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
additional three seconds will make the radio display the Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SETUP Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
Sirius subscription.
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
and press and release that button. If a button is not button number will display.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butButtons 1 - 6
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
stored into pushbutton memory.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) —
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display If Equipped
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is REL/RET radios only with Uconnect®. For sales code
correct.
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod®/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
Setting The Analog Clock
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod®
or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB Connector Port
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
where the iPod® or consumer electronic audio device
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable Using This Feature
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
lid to close without damaging the cable.
connect to the USB port:
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
etc.) information on the radio display.
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
pressing radio switches, as described below.
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/ • The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
audio device).
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long
enough will jump to the beginning of the current
Play Mode
track.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
onds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the • Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 deprevious or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
Track⬙.
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
and next tracks.
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling
through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
delay in updating the information on the radio
display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Selecting A Different Audio Device
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
Uconnect® phone system.
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
Audio”.
Next Track
Play Mode
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can radio and say “Next Track”, to jump to the next music
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but track on your cellular phone.
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect® Previous Track
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected the radio and say “Previous Track”, to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
and played.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio
(BTSA) device. Only the current song that is playing will
display info.
UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) —
If Equipped
4
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen(s).
Video Entertainment System (VES™)
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with either a standard
DVD player or a Blu-ray Disc Player. If equipped with
a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon will be present on the
Player.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turn on the Player (if equipped on Dual Screen Sys- Blu-ray Player
tem) by pushing the Power button, located on the far
Play A Blu-ray Disc
left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control.
To view a Blu-ray insert the disc into the Blu-ray VES™
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu- disc Player. Playback will begin automatically after the
ray Disc is inserted into the VES™ player, the screen(s) Blu-ray is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does
turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into the
turn on and playback begins.
Blu-ray player press the play button. If playback does not
• For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the begin automatically after the disc is inserted into Blu-ray
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 VES™ disc Player follow these steps:
(second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control Using the Touch-Screen Radio
and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to
• Press the MENU hard-key, then touch the Rear VES™
the Dual Video Screen section for more information.
soft key. If a chapter list appears on the right side of the
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occuscreen, touch the hide list soft key to display the Rear
pants using either the touch-screen- radio, the DVD or
VES™ control screen.
Blu-ray Disc Player, or by the rear seat occupants using
• Touch the 1 soft-key to select an audio channel, then
the remote control.
touch the VES™ Disc soft-key in the media column.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Using the Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Channel 1 for 2nd row screen
and Channel 2 for 3rd row screen), then press the
source key and select VES™ Disc from the menu.
• Press popup/menu key to navigate disc menu and
options.
4
NOTE: Due to the size of the content on a Blu-ray disc,
the disc may not start playing immediately.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks or HDMI port, located on the left side behind 1. HDMI port
2. Audio/Video In
the second row seat.
3. Power Outlet
4. USB Inputs
5. Power Inverter
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX input,
be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter section
in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more information.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES
AUX 1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right
buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button,
then press ENTER on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch either AUX 1 or
AUX 2 in the VES column (depending which AUX input
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
is used). To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the top
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
of the screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
4
Select Channel/Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The
VES Column
Rear VES Soft-key
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video
is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and choose
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
the top left of the left screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
4
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The
Media Column
Rear VES Soft-Key
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
switch is on Channel 1.
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
• The Remote Control
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
on Channel 2.
Dual Video Screen
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
Using The Remote Control
NOTE: Headunit DVD player does not play Blu-Ray discs. 1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the SOURCE button, then press
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
ENTER/OK.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
4
Select DISC Mode On The VES™ Screen
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Rear VES Soft-key
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player (If Equipped)
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES™
the top left of the screen.
player automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and starts playing the DVD.
NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control funchard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC tion such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is 2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
switch is on Channel 1.
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis- 3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers,
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
brake must be engaged.
on Channel 2.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES DISC by
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
repeatedly pressing the SOURCE button, then press
on the right side of the screen.
ENTER/OK on the Remote Control.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
the VES column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key
at the top left of the screen.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column
Rear VES Soft-key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
NOTE:
Play A Blu-ray Disc Using The Blu-ray Player
(If Equipped)
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC 1. Insert the Blu-ray disc with the label facing up. The
Blu-ray player automatically selects the appropriate
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
the Blu-ray disc.
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the NOTE: The Blu-ray player has basic control functions
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis- such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop.
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Screen 1 for second row
brake must be engaged.
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Screen 2 for third row
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2.
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Blu-ray player Re- 1.
mote Control.
2.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight Blu-ray by
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the SOURCE button, then press
OK on the Remote Control.
3.
NOTE:
Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to display the Rear
VES™ Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch
the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES™
Controls screen.
Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the VES™ Disc
soft-key in the VES™ column. To exit touch the back
arrow soft-key at the top left of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown • To view a Blu-ray Disc on the radio press the RADIO/
on the right side of the screen.
MEDIA hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch
the VES™ Disc tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
• Viewing a Blu-ray Disc on the Touch-Screen radio 2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
vehicle must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in
SOURCE button on the remote until the desired audio
the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transsource appears on the screen.
mission. In vehicles with manual transmission the
parking brake must be engaged.
Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing
4
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on
the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1 (second
row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If watching
a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1 could be
used for audio.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video
is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and choose
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
the top left of the left screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The
Media Column
Rear VES Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video
source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2
• VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
and can be heard on Channel 2.
and video simultaneously.
• The 2nd row screen and 3rd row screen of the Video
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Entertainment System can play two separate discs
Blu-ray Discs.
by utilizing the touch-screen radio DVD player and
• The DVD Player can play CDs and DVDs.
Blu-ray Disc Player.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 • Audio can be heard through the headphones even
and the right side equates to Channel 2.
when the screen(s) are closed.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
source will display on the second row screen or
Screen 1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VES™ Remote Control – If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which 7. POP UP/MENU – Press to return to the main menu of
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
RANDOM for a CD).
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of 9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
the screen).
10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip back and fast fwd/
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
skip forward – When listening to a radio mode,
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressthrough the current audio track or video chapter. In
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
the start of the current or previous audio track or
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the
Down selects the previous disc.
menu.
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output 16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
for the selected channel.
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
12. SLOW – If Equipped – Press to slow playback of a
contents.
DVD disc. Press play (䉴) to resume normal play.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
13. STATUS – If Equipped – Press to display the current
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
status.
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
14. MODE/SOURCE – Press to change the mode of the
selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of
18. ENTER/OK – Press to select the highlighted option
this manual for details on changing modes.
in a menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
button to access the display settings (see the display
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes,
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
use to navigate in the menu.
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode
is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Blu-ray Player Remote Control – If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is pressed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Press to enter Source Selection screen.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (second row). When the selector switch is
in the Rear 2, position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (third row).
4
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. 䉴 – Press to navigate menus.
11. KEYPAD – Press to navigate chapters or titles.
6. SETUP – Press to access the Blu-ray Setup menu 12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
screen. When a disc is loaded in the Blu-ray player
(if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected and the 13. 䉳䉳 – Press and release to jump to the previous
audio track or video chapter. Press and hold to fast
disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access the
rewind through the current audio track or video
Blu-ray Setup menu.
chapter.
7. 䉴䉴 – Press and release to jump to the next available
audio track or video chapter. Press and hold to fast 14. Mutes headphone audio.
forward through the current audio track or video 15. BACK – Press to exit out of menus or return to source
chapter.
selection screen.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play. 16.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Press to access Blu-ray disc 17.
features.
18.
10. POPUP/MENU – Press to access the Blu-ray main
menu when in Blu-ray or DVD mode. Press to start 19.
Scan or start Random track functions in CD or HDD
modes.
䉲 – Press to navigate menus.
OK – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu.
䉳 – Press to navigate menus.
䉱 – Press to navigate menus.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
4
The Remote Control Storage
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
• To disable the Remote Control from making any • Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
according to the polarity diagram shown.
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
4
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully 1. Volume Control
2. Power Button
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
3. Channel Selection Switch
4. Power Indicator
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully 1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
3. Channel Selection Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
on the right ear cup.
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve 3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
is turned off.
Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to naviswitch.
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to
NOTE:
select the new mode.
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to
BACK button on the remote control.
the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
Controls
4
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
headphones, and then slide the battery cover down- use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
ward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown.
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Warranty
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTWho Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED
Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless head- LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
phone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and
jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you
specific legal rights. You may also have other rights,
which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email [email protected]
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option,
will repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired®
reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product
with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE
SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH
YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING
ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Shared Modes
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
ability to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
Information Mode Display
4. Channel 2 Mode
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER/OK Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER/OK Button Action
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Information Mode Video Screen Display
1. Channel 1 Mode
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s OK
button activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen
makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite
channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to select the digit. Repeat
these steps until all digits are entered.
Numeric Keypad Menu
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Station List Menu
Disc Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list of all
available channels. Navigate this list using the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired
station, press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button to
tune to that station. To jump through the list more
quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on
the screen.
4
Disc Menu For CDs
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play
and Random play.
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically seTo change the settings, press the remote control’s navilect the next available audio mode without using the
gation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
button.
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if equipped) audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
are installed in the headphones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
Disc Formats
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow- • DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
ing types of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
profile 3.0
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression)
(see notes about DVD Region Codes)
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
DVD/BD Region Codes
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
The Blu-Ray player is capable of the playing the follow- player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
ing types of discs (12 cm diameter):
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD, which may result in a lowered apparent volume level.
DVD-VR
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you increase the volume level to account for this To help avoid playback problems, use the following
change in level, remember to lower the volume before guidelines when recording discs.
changing the disc or to another mode.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
Recorded Discs
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs • For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple
CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
tracks so each track number is unique.
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or reISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
corded) are not supported.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
supported.
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and
to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in
99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
a compatible format and is playable on other players.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
these extensions for any other types of files.
recording software publisher for more information about
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
burning playable discs.
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs • Any file that is copy protected (such as those down(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
begin playing the next available file.
DVD player.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin playThe DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
ing the next available file.
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
supported. For both formats, the recommended
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
previous file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote con- The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
Disc Errors
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutIf the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙ down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays player.
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
The Blu-ray player may require additional reading time
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
during extremely cold weather conditions. When this
⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
occurs, allow the vehicles interior temperature to warm,
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible then insert disc into player.
or visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Display
Other Language Setup
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English.
These languages are selected using a special four-digit
code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER/OK button.
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select the
⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons,
select a digit for the current position. After selecting the
DVD Player Language Menu
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
digit, press the remote control’s Right cursor button to Rating and Password Setup
select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence
The Rating and Password settings work together to
for all four digits.
control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
• When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the language them where lower numbers are designated for all audicode is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙. ences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
If the digits are visible after this step, then the lan- audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
guage code is valid.
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenvehicle was purchased.
ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
Language
Code
Language
Code
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
Dutch
2311
French
1517
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
German
1304
Italian
1819
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Portuguese 2519
Spanish
1418
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
password) and the default password is 0000.
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons,
select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the set password screen is displayed.
DVD Password Entry
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons
to set the value for the current digit and the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select digits, enter the
new password.
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the change.
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the remote
control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value
for the current digit, and then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this
digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER/OK button. If the password
is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
DVD Player Level Menu
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons,
select the new rating level, and then press the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button to accept the change.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Product Agreement
Software
This product contains software licensed under GNU
General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code
of the GPL/LGPL software. You may download Source
Code from the following website at no charge.
URL: http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/
oss/download/SRC_632_34W821
The website provides the Source Code ⬙As Is⬙ and
without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source
Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that accompany
each Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to
any inquiries regarding the source code.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (⬙VC-1 VIDEO⬙)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
Patents
Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message
will be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology
is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology under
license from Verance Corporation and is protected by
U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,
patents issued and pending as well as copyright and
Symbol and DTS 2.0 Channel are trademarks of DTS,
trade secret protection for certain aspects of such techInc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
nology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation.
Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
is prohibited.
Dolby Laboratories.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technol- ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is video. Visit divx.com for more information and software
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certiengineering or disassembly is prohibited.
fied® device must be registered in order to play pur• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: chased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more
information on how to complete your registration.
4
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trade- STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
marks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are IF EQUIPPED
used under license.
Trademark
• Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ and the logos are trademarks
of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its
affiliates.
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, after the current track begins to play.
depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op- second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
eration in each mode.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
Radio Operation
function in this mode.
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
precautions:
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. before considering disc player service.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
ing the disc.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
When the front control is in any position other than rear,
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
the front control operates all the rear functions.
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operainstrument panel, below the radio.
tion. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System —
front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is
If Equipped
in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior of the rear floor outlets.
conditions.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Rear Blower Control — If Equipped
• Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the rear system in any mode you select. The
rear blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven
blower speeds. To allow the rear overhead control,
turn blower knob fully to the left, past The ⬙O⬙ off
position into the “REAR” control position.
3. Front Blower Control
• Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The
Manual Temperature Control
blower speed increases as you move the control to the
1. Left Front Temperature Control
right from the “O” (Off) position. There are seven
blower speeds.
• Provides left front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
warmer temperature settings.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
position. Blower control should be left in the ⬙ON⬙ 7. Front Defrost Mode
position to allow the climate control to either warm or
Air is directed through the windshield and side
cool the vehicle.
window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
4. Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
• Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn windshield and side window defrosting.
left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in
in the rear cabin.
Mix and Defrost, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
5. Right Front Temperature Control
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
• Provides right front seat occupant with independent
these modes only when necessary.
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
8. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
warmer temperature settings.
6. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
9. Recirculation Control Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke,
or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial
start-up in very hot or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation
button is pressed and the mode control is set to Panel,
• If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system
the A/C will engage automatically.
is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will
flash 3 times to indicate Recirculation mode is not • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturballowed.
ing the mode control selection.
NOTE:
• In Floor and Mix mode the system will turn off 10. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation mode after five minutes of operation.
Press and release to change the current setting.
You can select Recirculation mode again if desired.
The indicator illuminates when ON.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia
defogging, select the outside air position.
protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing
air conditioning performance.
4
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small
seat passengers.
amount through the defrost and side window deEconomy Mode
mist outlets.
11. Floor Mode Button
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
Floor modes.
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer Max A/C
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
mode buttons at the same time.
12. Bi-Level Mode Button
13. Panel Mode Button
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
4
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower
2 – Rear Temperature
3 – Rear Mode
4 – Rear Climate Control Lock
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the right side trim
panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat Floor Mode
occupants.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Headliner Mode
Recirculation Control
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
to one side will shut off the airflow.
pressing the Recirculation control button. ReBi-Level Mode
circulation mode should only be used temporarily. The
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
floor outlets.
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
4
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air temperature,
• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
the airflow volume, amount of outside air recirculation and
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
the airflow direction. This maintains a comfortable temselect individual comfort settings.
perature, even under changing conditions.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the
cabin, if desired.
Front ATC Panel
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
5. Front Auto Indicator
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. 6. Auto Indicator
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.
into manual mode.
2. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
7. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
front seat occupant.
3. Mode Display
8. Front Defrost Button
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
4. Blower Control Display
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
This display shows the current Blower speed selection. selected.
4
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Passenger Temperature Control Up/Down Button
12. Auto Temperature Control Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
the lower button for cooler temperature settings.
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
10. Rear Control Button
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
Provides toggle operation between front control screen modes.
and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the
13. Climate Control OFF Button
rear climate control screen and allow the front seat
Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF. If the
occupants control over the rear climate settings.
control is OFF, press any button to turn the control ON.
11. Rear Lock
14. Blower Control
Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases
panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls.
as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower
setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to
switch into manual mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
15. Mode Control Button
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
ATC to switch into manual mode.
16. Recirculation Control Button
To change the rear system settings:
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica- • Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functor illuminates when ON.
tions now operate rear system.
17. SYNC Button
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
Press and release to control the temperature setting for all
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
three zones from the driver temperature control.
18. Driver Temperature Control Up/Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the
lower button for cooler temperature settings.
4
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
4. Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Automatic Operation
Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passenger,
This display shows the current Mode selection.
and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the de2. Rear Temperature Display
sired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear
seat occupants.
1. Mode Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Rear Mode Control
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- Headliner Mode
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
system to function automatically.
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
NOTE:
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings to one side will shut off the airflow.
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to pro- Bi-Level Mode
vide comfort as quickly as possible.
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
floor outlets.
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec- NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer- mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Programmable Features” in this Section.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic Floor Mode
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
Air comes from the floor outlets.
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the front blower knob setting
4
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
This system offers a full complement of manual override adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
be turned off when the system is being used in the selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
manual mode.
Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati- by selecting one of the following positions.
Panel Mode
cally.
Manual Operation
Blower Control
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted for
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
Use the outer dial control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
in any mode you select. The blower instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
speed increases as you move the control seat passengers.
clockwise and decreases when you
move the control counter-clockwise.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
Bi-Level Mode
Mix Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
air is also directed through the side window demister snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable,
outlets.
while keeping the windshield clear.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL Defrost Mode
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
Air comes from the windshield and side window
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxiFloor Mode
mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
window demister outlets.
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
4
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
• The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operahigh humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
tor to manually activate or deactivate the air condiyou may wish to recirculate interior air by
tioning system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set
pressing the Recirculation control button. Reto a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through
the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the circulation mode should only be used temporarily. A LED
A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC will illuminate on the Recirculation control button when
Recirculation mode is selected. Push the button a second
display and deactivate the A/C system.
time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow
NOTE:
outside air into the vehicle.
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the
right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC
panel located on the instrument panel.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front
ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display.
The rear temperature and air source are controlled from
the front ATC panel.
Rear ATC Control Features
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear 1 - Blower Speed
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is 2 - Rear Temperature
turned off.
3 - Rear Mode
4 - Rear Temperature Lock
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front NOTE:
ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
icon in the rear temperature knob.
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob • The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
counterclockwise to AUTO.
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “ElecOnce the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — CustomerSystem will automatically achieve and maintain that
Programmable Features” in this Section.
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457
Rear Blower Control
Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC panel.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob
is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are
ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode
and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
4
458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headliner Mode
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Bi-Level Mode
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
floor outlets.
Winter Operation
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functionliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concenAir comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459
Vacation/Storage
Outside Air Intake
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
A/C Air Filter
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out
dust and pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . .467
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .474
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .476
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .472
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .510
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . .492 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .515
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .494
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .518
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped . . .520
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .529
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .521
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .526
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .528
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .534
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .539
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . .
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .545
▫ Common Towing Definitions .
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
. . . . . . . . . . . .552
. . . . . . . . . . . .552
. . . . . . . . . . . .564
. . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .566
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Recreational Towing – All Models . . . . . . . . . .566
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ – If Equipped
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push Removing The Button
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
START/STOP button is installed and
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ FOBIK is in the passenger com- 2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
partment.
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry
the button loose.
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
Installing The Button
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
the engine starting, press the button again.
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In
pedal.
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
OFF position.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – With Driver’s
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
follow these steps.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn
once.
the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to
CAUTION!
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
before trying again.
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
After Starting
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proceThe idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
decrease as the engine warms up.
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the shift lever is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out
of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Press the “econ” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the
ECON mode is engaged.
Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to
allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
• The torque converter clutch will engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
Shift Lever
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (described later in this section).
Moving the shift lever to the left or right (–/+) while in
the DRIVE position will select the highest available
transmission gear, and will display that gear in the
instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauThis is especially important when the engine is cold.
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that NEUTRAL
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the transmis- periods with the engine running. The engine may be
sion all the way forward and to the left until it stops started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
and is fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth
gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under all
normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control (described below) to select a lower gear range.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
following steps:
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
available gear.
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
not shift above third gear (except to prevent engine the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
overspeed), but will shift down into second and first gear lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
normally.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
Odometer Screen Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
1
1
2
1–2
WARNING!
5
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
3
1–3
4
1–4
5
1–5
6
1–6
D
1–6
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con- NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
ditions are present:
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temclutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
perature,
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
• the engine coolant has reached an adequate tem- Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmisperature,
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centi- Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
meters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warning before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from
all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed, or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or
hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC),
and Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake maneuvers.
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
WARNING!
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS • The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
traction afforded.
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the • The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydrowill allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
planing.
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if • The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
Traction Control System (TCS)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manageThe “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC On
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on mode of operation.
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
WARNING!
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality of
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
ESC Partial Off
the TCS section), has been disabled and the ⴖESC Off
Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated. When in ⴖPartial
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Offⴖ mode, the engine power reduction feature of
Off” switch.
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowith snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
diagnosed and corrected.
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lomode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
the vehicle is in motion.
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acESC OFF Indicator Light
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
WARNING! (Continued)
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excesand the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
will become active automatically once an excessively
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is rewhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
that caused the ESC activation.
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can 4. Start the engine.
be done using the Customer Programmable Features in 5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower switch Towing With HSA
bank below the climate controls) four times within HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator when pulling a trailer.
Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm
HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Code (TIN)
5 — Maximum Pressure
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaExample: T145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units
of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded
into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
B-Pillar Location for Tire And
Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
• For the following example, the combined weight of
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(392 kg).
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
vehicle to drift left or right.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
temperature changes.
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condiTire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operathe winter.
tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
WARNING!
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiduring operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
meets the following criteria:
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
Tire Repair
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
your vehicle.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Snow Tires
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and Wheel – If Equipped
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
safety and handling of your vehicle.
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
WARNING!
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inyour original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
first opportunity.
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
factors including, but not limited to:
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
• Driving style
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Tire pressure
Replacement Tires
• Distance driven
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manutread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
WARNING!
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex- • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
of unapproved tires and wheels may change susmanual for more information relating to the Load Index
pension dimensions and performance characterisand Speed Symbol of a tire.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictrear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
able handling and stress to steering and suspenaffect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
sion components. You could lose control and have
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
those of the original wheels.
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
(Continued)
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
CAUTION!
• 225/65R16 and 235/60R16 tires with the use of a traction
device that meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is
recommended.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 and 225/65R17
tires with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low
profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure requireeffects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
ments found on the tire placard label located on the
driver’s-side B-pillar.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
to be turned off. The system will automatically update
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
received.
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard
pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi
(207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This
tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
the tire.
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
Base System
condition.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will display
in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime
will be activated when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
TPMS sensors.
vehicle’s recommended cold tire placard pressure value
(located on the placard label on the driver’s-side B-Pillar). 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
that affects radio wave signals.
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once 3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the updated tire pressures have been received.
the wheels or wheel housings.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
solid.
pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warntire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “Tire
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off as
will sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
be displayed and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tellwarning limit in any of the four active road tires.
tale Light” will turn on.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
receive this information.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimmounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
with the low tire(s) flashing.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following components:
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
• Receiver Module
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic display
• Four TPMS Sensors
to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. The
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- system will automatically update, the graphic display of
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the “Tire
displaying tire pressures
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.
• TPMS Telltale Warning Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this any of the following scenarios:
information.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message
TPMS sensors.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
that affects radio wave signals.
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
the wheels or wheel housings.
message is then followed by a graphic display, with - - in
place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Sensor(s) is not being received.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
Light” will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
message is then followed by a graphic display with
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres- 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
Vehicles With Compact Spare
in place of the pressure value.
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
pressure in the compact spare tire.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnthen display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on, the
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be displayed, a
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value in the graphic display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire
pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followTPMS to receive this information.
ing licenses:
United States
Canada
MRXC4W4MA4
2546A-C4W4MA4
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
Reformulated Gasoline
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
improve air quality.
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle.
fuel system components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containgenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
E-85 perform the following:
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• change the engine oil and oil filter
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
engine controller memory
and California reformulated gasoline.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Materials Added To Fuel
exposure to E-85 fuel.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT In Gasoline
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
15% unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
the above recommendations are followed, especially
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may
be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol comleft side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
patible parts.
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
is full.
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking” “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
properly tightened.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is heard.
This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly
the vehicle is refueled.
tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
• Type of Vehicle
specified GVWR and GAWR.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
the drivers side “B” Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rim Size
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles listed.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Inflation Pressure
rear GAWR.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
Tire Size
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Overloading
Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
evenly over the front and rear axles.
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and and GAWRs.
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
In this section you will find safety tips and information Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do further information.
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
hicles used for trailer towing.
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
Common Towing Definitions
supported by the scale.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
you in understanding the following information:
TRAILER TOWING
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Frontal Area
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
information.
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
as part of the load on your vehicle.
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with an
authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer
for additional information.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR
(Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
Frontal Area
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,600 lbs
(1 633 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
8,750 lbs (3 969 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
3.6L/Automatic
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue
Weight
360 lbs (163 kg)
335 lbs (152 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
by 100 lbs (45 kg).
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and your bumper or trailer hitch.
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer.
train components, the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended.
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
WARNING! (Continued)
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
Towing Requirements – Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
WARNING! (Continued)
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
5
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
Four-Pin Connector
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins
wiring harness.
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, followtow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
ing the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
this procedure:
5. Release the parking brake.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational Towing – All Models
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Securing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut. . . . . . .574
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Spare Tire Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Spare Tire Removal Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .578 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .598
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Jack And Tool Location
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by
means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire
drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at
the front of the floor console or under front super console
forward bin liner.
6
Spare Tire Location
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut
To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the
spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following
center console configurations.
Super Console
For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare tire
winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console.
Super Console
1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor
console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut.
2. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compartment.
3. Remove the liner from the console’s storage compartment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.
6
Drive Nut Access
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console
Spare Tire Tools
Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be asaccess the winch drive nut.
sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/
cover assembly.
Winch Cover Assembly Plug (If Equipped)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
6
Assembled T-handle
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
Assembling The Spare Tire Hook
A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism
stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in
The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the
the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from
center console area.
underneath the vehicle.
Spare Tire Removal Instructions
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a
spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under
the vehicle.
Spare Tire And Cover
1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place
the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
4. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the
wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs
together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to
release it from the wheel.
6
Pulling Spare Tire
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle.
Removing Wheel Spacer
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing out.
(Continued)
6
Jack Warning Label
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of
“Tires – General Information” for information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
Jack Locations
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill
flange of the vehicle body.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
CAUTION!
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.
6
Rear Jacking Locations
Front Jack Locations
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle.
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until
Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
the vehicle.
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
Mounting Spare Tire
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut tightness is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m).If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to
form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch
mechanism clicks at least three times.
NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Tools” section for instructions on assembling the T-handle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the stowage compartment.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow 13. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
the deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
Securing The Spare Tire
CAUTION!
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a
T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mecha- winch T-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
nism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack power tools is not recommended and can damage the
in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out winch.
from under the vehicle.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under
WARNING!
the vehicle.
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the compact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover
assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the
two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire
cover on the opposite side.
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
6
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
handle counterclockwise.
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightlug nuts.
ness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
WARNING!
station.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
seated against the wheel.
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightend of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
ness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt
lug nuts.
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
WARNING!
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
6
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
Preparations For Jump-Start
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump- The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in the engine compartment.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Positive Battery Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
cables in the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
and the fuel injection system.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
you should have the battery and charging system inthe least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
spected at your authorized dealer.
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.Once the vehicle has been freed, press the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by
excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
shift lever override access cover (located near the top
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
right of the shift lever in the instrument panel).
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel lift
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Rear
Flatbed
Front
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
ALL MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see ⬙Shift Lever
Override⬙ in ⬙What To Do In Emergencies⬙ for instructions
on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
With Ignition Key
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed
equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed 15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel
approved method of towing without the ignition key is lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Without the Key Fob
6
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .604
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . .637
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .638
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Quad Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Front Position Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . .651
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .652
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
soon as possible.
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
CAUTION!
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emisfurther damage to the emission control system. It
sions well within current government regulations.
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).”
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel PROGRAMS
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Unnance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaIndicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightsystem is ready for testing.
ened.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacetime the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
not crank or start the engine.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
this test over.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
3. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
of a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
happen:
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
WARNING!
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufac- You can be badly injured working on or around a
turer’s warranty.
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
REPLACEMENT PARTS
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an
authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informaChecking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will tion.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change interthe oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at whichever occurs first.
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
This symbol means that the oil has starting and vehicle fuel economy.
been certified by the American
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Petroleum Institute (API). The
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
manufacturer only recommends
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine ComAPI Certified engine oils.
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-S1
or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS- 6395 is not available.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomyour area.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic Engine Oils
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the at every engine oil change.
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) Engine Oil Filter Selection
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
additives.
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, filter and are recommended.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
maintenance intervals.
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
vehicle.
you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
oil, and refrigerants.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter 6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance
of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water
lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
present,
clean
the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR® All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking , tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be flushed with
OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Adding Coolant
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stancoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concenallows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cooltrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main- The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac- accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
WARNING!
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and
condenser clean.
in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant
(antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
against freezing.
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
Brake System
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
fluid specifications.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
any special additives in the transmission.
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
product and its performance may be impaired by suppleprovided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addimission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transleaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
adversely affect seals.
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
What Causes Corrosion?
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
is disassembled for any reason.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads • Stone and gravel impact.
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on • Insects, tree sap and tar.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Fluid And Filter Changes
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a noncost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
the owner.
• For chrome wheels, use MOPAR® Chrome Cleaner
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
(Part#04318013) or equivalent.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner
packaged and sealed.
(Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
CAUTION!
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
(Continued)
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
If Equipped
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting use protectants or other products which may cause
with a clean, dry towel.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivayour leather upholstery. Application of a leather condilent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
WARNING!
clean vinyl upholstery
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom- closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
mended for leather upholstery.
Cleaning Headlights
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. stone breakage than glass headlights.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Cleaning Interior Trim
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- directly on the mirror.
lowed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winrag.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Seat Belt Maintenance
Cleaning
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. the cleaning procedure below.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
cloth.
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
buckles do not work properly.
with a clean soft cloth.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Installation
Removal
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
at one edge to ease removal.
corresponding openings in the drawer.
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A
label that identifies each component may be printed or
embossed on the inside of the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
CAUTION!
• When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
Description
—
Power Folding Seat
—
—
Power Liftgate
Module
Rear Door Module
—
Driver Door Node
—
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
—
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J7
J8
J9
J10
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
—
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
—
30 Amp
Pink
—
—
Description
Cavity
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Memory
Seat – If Equipped
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor/Flex Fuel –
If Equipped
Headlamp Wash/
Manifold Tuning
Valve – If Equipped
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
Description
Power Sliding Door
Module/Anti-Theft
Module –
If Equipped
HVAC Rear Blower,
Radiator Fan Motor
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Main
Rear Window
Defogger
Front Blower
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Cavity
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
Starter Solenoid
M1
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
M2
—
—
Powertrain Control
Module Trans
Range
Radiator Fan
M3
—
—
Front Wiper LO/HI
M4
—
—
Front/Rear Washer
M5
—
—
Sunroof Module
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Rear Center Brake
Lamp/Brake
Switch
Front Fog Lamps
Front/Rear Axle
Locker, Vacuum
Pump Motor
Trailer Tow
Inverter
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M6
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
M7
—
20 Amp
Yellow
M8
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Power Outlet #1
(ACC), Rain Sensor,
Cigar Lighter
(Instrument Panel
or with
Console Rear)
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC
SELECT) – Center
Seat or with
Console Rear
Front Heated Seat –
If Equipped
M9
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M10
—
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Rear Heated Seat –
If Equipped
Ignition Off
Draw — Video System, Satellite Radio,
DVD, Hands-Free
Module, Universal
Garage Door
Opener, Vanity
Lamp, Streaming
Video Module –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
M11
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M12
—
M13
—
Cavity
M14
—
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Climate Control
System
Amplifier/Radio
M15
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M16
—
10 Amp
Red
M17
—
15 Amp
Blue
Instrument Cluster,
SIREN, Clock
Module, MultiFunction Control
Switch –
If Equipped
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Rear View Mirror,
Instrument Cluster,
Multi-Function
Control Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor,
Glow Plug Module
– If Equipped
Airbag Module/
Occupant Classification Module
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp,
Running Lamps
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
M18
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M19
—
M20
—
Cavity
M21
—
M22
—
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Right Tail/Park/
Run Lamp
Powertrain
M23
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M24
—
Instrument Cluster
Interior Light,
Switch Bank,
Steering Column
Module, Switch
Steering Wheel
Powertrain
M25
—
M26
—
10 Amp
Red
M27
—
10 Amp
Red
Horn
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Horn
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump, Diesel
Lift Pump –
If Equipped
Power Mirror
Switch, Driver
Window Switch
Wireless Control
Module, Keyless
Entry Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
M28
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M29
—
M30
—
M31
—
M32
—
Cavity
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Powertrain,
Transmission
Control Module
Occupant Classification Module
Rear Wiper
Module, Power
Folding Mirror
Back-Up Lamps
M33
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M34
—
Airbag Module,
THATCHUM –
If Equipped
M35
—
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Powertrain
Park Assist, Heater
Climate Control
Module, Headlamp
Wash, Compass,
Rear Camera, Door
Lamps, Flashlight,
Relay Diesel Cabin
Heater, Rad Fan
Diesel – If
Equipped
Heated Mirrors
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
VEHICLE STORAGE
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Power Outlet #3
(Instrument Panel
or with Console
Center)
Antilock Brakes,
Stability Control,
Stop Lamp, Fuel
Pump
Door Lock/Unlock
Motors, Liftgate
Lock/Unlock
Motors
The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located in the Totally Integrated Power Module.
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may do the following:
• Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in the Totally Integrated
Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw
(IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Center & Rear Dome
Lamp
Center & Rear Reading
Lamps
Front Door Courtesy
Lamp
Front Header Reading
Lamps – If Equipped
Bulb Number
578
578
578
578
Instrument Cluster
Lamps
Liftgate Lamp(s)
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
Removable Console
Lamp – If Equipped
Visor Vanity Lamps
Bulb Number
PC74
578
PC579
194
6501966
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – (Low and
High Beam Halogen)
Headlamp (HID – If
Equipped) Low Beam
Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Side Marker
Front Park/Turn Signal
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Tail, Stop, and
Side Marker Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Backup Lamp
License
BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number
H11
D1S
H11
W5W
PY27/7W or 3757A
3757A
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
3157
168
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) —
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Quad Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at
the rear of the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and 1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove the connector from the bulb.
housing.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the 2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing.
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
into the headlamp housing.
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
remove bulb.
housing.
Front Position Lamp
NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to
remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp
housing for bulb replacement.
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp
housing, then pull the bulb out.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp 2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
housing.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the
fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push
pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
scratch the paint.
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side • The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
to disengage the two ball studs.
dislodging them separately.
1. Raise the liftgate.
3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, 3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
see your authorized dealer.
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into
place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and
pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
20 Gallons
76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
13.4 Quarts
12.6 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you ONLY use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance
of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used.
If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4®
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
658 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 659 M
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
64,000
30,000
48,000
32,000
20,000
M 660 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the
T
E
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
A
N
C
Or Years: 2
3
E
Or Kilometers:
S
C
H
E Additional Inspections
D
X
U Inspect the CV joints.
L Inspect front suspension, tie rod
E ends, boot seals, and replace if
X
S necessary.
8 Inspect the brake linings, parking X
brake function.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 663 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .668
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .669
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .672
9
666 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 667
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
Prepare A List
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident with our products and services.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
service advisor know.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
9
668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer
center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Authorized dealer name
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
solved with this process.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
They want to know if you need assistance.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
Phone: (800) 247–9753
center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
9
670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract.
It is not responsible for any service contract other than
the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service
contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
manufacturer.
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
9
672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
in individual problems between you, your authorized To order the following manuals, you may use either
dealer, and the manufacturer.
the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa,
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: for an order form.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
Service Manuals
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need
in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Call toll free at:
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
674 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
Traction Grades
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
678 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .612
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control. . . . . . . . . .437
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Anti-Theft System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .446
INDEX 679
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . .
Brake Control System, Electronic
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.496
.494
.655
.627
.627
.490
.324
.474
.648
.125
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.546
.489
.624
.121
10
680 INDEX
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . .321
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.288
.289
.469
.436
.521
.344
.345
.346
.342
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.381
.381
.340
.289
.289
.255
.293
.670
.624
INDEX 681
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .340
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.620
.623
.653
.621
.625
.622
.625
.625
.624
.624
.622
.631
.278
.667
10
682 INDEX
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.272
.137
.494
.496
.240
.497
.329
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.570
.571
.592
.570
.605
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.612
.472
.120
.609
.603
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
INDEX 683
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . .
Filler Location Fuel . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.612
.459
.611
.611
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.546
.546
.545
.470
.289
.653
.125
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.630
.627
.621
.489
.654
.225
.650
.200
.595
.538
.546
10
684 INDEX
Additives . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . .
Economy Mode . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .
Filler Door (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.540
.538
.340
.474
.539
.323
.323
.538
.323
.326
.540
.539
.538
.538
.340
.653
.542
.546
.340
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
INDEX 685
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Hazard
Hook, Coat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Headlights
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .229 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
10
686 INDEX
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.14
.39
.20
.12
.16
.16
.12
.15
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
INDEX 687
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .499
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator)
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . .
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .321 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.229
.256
.651
.651
.325
.323
.647
.321
.650
.229
.323
.319
.499
.125
.326
.315
.288
.551
.511
10
688 INDEX
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.615
.608
.658
.321
.672
.256
.217
.137
.539
.342
.134
.135
.137
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
INDEX 689
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .511
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
10
690 INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .272
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.519
.624
.436
.434
.443
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .434
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
INDEX 691
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .70
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
10
692 INDEX
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . .321
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .434
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Storage Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
INDEX 693
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .79
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.315
.235
.446
.325
.235
.511
.504
.125
.524
.515
.526
.571
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.521
.515
.518
.517
.571
.524
.511
.529
.319
.673
.519
.524
.528
.504
.506
.520
.573
.523
.561
10
694 INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Torque Converter Clutch . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control Switch . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.523
.504
.558
.484
.552
.163
.598
.557
.566
.557
.163
.485
.495
.495
.500
.552
.565
.556
.559
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .260
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Umbrella Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
INDEX 695
.673 Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
.381
.260 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
.538 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
.634
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .315
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s
electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals.
Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed
properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed
during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative
power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to
the negative battery connection. This connection should not be
fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the
rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas
with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation
of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away
from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded
coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic
systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
13C481-126-AE
300
5th Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement